1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2011 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "LICENSE" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
45 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
46 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
52 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
53 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
54 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
55 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
56 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
57 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
78 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
79 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
80 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
83 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
84 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
86 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
88 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
90 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
92 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
94 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
95 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
96 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
98 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
101 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
102 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
103 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
104 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
105 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
106 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
107 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
108 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
110 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
111 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
112 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
113 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
114 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
115 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
116 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
117 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
119 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
121 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
122 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
123 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
124 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
126 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
127 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
128 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
129 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
130 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
131 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
132 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
134 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
135 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
136 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
137 \IA{command line}{command-line}
138 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
139 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
142 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
143 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
145 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
146 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
147 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
148 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
151 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
152 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
154 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
155 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
156 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
157 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
159 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
160 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
163 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
164 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
165 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
166 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
167 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
169 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
170 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
171 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
173 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
174 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
175 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
177 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
178 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
179 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
180 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
181 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
182 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
183 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
184 \IR{logical and} logical AND
185 \IR{logical or} logical OR
186 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
187 \IR{mach object file format} Mach, object file format
189 \IR{macho32} \c{macho32}
190 \IR{macho64} \c{macho64}
193 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
195 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
196 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
197 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
198 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
199 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
200 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
202 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
203 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
205 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
209 \IR{operating system} operating system
211 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
212 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
217 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
218 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
219 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
220 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
221 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
222 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
223 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
224 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
226 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
227 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
228 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
229 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
230 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
231 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
232 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
233 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
234 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
235 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
236 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
237 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
238 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
240 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
241 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
242 \IA{sectalign}{sectalign}
243 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
244 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
245 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
246 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
247 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
249 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
255 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
256 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
257 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
258 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
259 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
260 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
261 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
263 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
264 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
265 \IR{www page} WWW page
269 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
270 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
271 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
272 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
273 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
274 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
275 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
278 \C{intro} Introduction
280 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
282 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
283 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
284 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
285 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
286 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
287 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
288 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
289 strong support for macros.
292 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
294 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
295 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
296 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
297 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
299 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
300 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
302 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
303 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
304 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
305 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
306 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
309 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
310 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
312 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
315 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
316 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
317 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
318 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
319 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
321 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
322 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
323 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
324 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
325 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
326 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
330 \S{legal} \i{License} Conditions
332 Please see the file \c{LICENSE}, supplied as part of any NASM
333 distribution archive, for the license conditions under which you may
334 use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called 2-clause BSD license, also
335 known as the simplified BSD license.
337 Copyright 1996-2011 the NASM Authors - All rights reserved.
339 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
340 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
343 \b Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
344 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
346 \b Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
347 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
348 documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
350 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
351 CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
352 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
353 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
354 DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
355 CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
356 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
357 NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
358 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
359 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
360 CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
361 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
362 EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
365 \H{contact} Contact Information
367 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
368 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
369 (see below for the link).
370 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
372 NASM has a \i{website} at
373 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}. If it's not there,
376 \i{New releases}, \i{release candidates}, and \I{snapshots, daily
377 development}\i{daily development snapshots} of NASM are available from
378 the official web site.
380 Announcements are posted to
381 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
383 \W{http://www.freshmeat.net/}\c{http://www.freshmeat.net/}.
385 If you want information about the current development status, please
386 subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list; see link from the
390 \H{install} Installation
392 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
394 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
395 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
396 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
397 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
399 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
400 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
401 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
404 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
405 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
406 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
407 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
408 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
409 under other versions of Windows as well.)
411 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
412 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
413 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
414 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
416 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
417 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
418 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
419 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
422 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
423 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
424 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
425 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
426 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
427 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
428 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
429 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
432 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
434 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
435 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
436 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
437 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
438 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
440 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
441 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
442 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
443 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
446 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
447 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
448 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
449 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
450 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
451 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
452 install the programs yourself.
454 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
455 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
456 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
457 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
460 \C{running} Running NASM
462 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
464 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
466 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
470 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
472 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
474 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
476 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
478 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
479 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
480 to give a listing file name, for example:
482 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
484 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
488 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
491 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
496 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
497 installed it). If it says something like
499 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
501 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
502 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
504 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
506 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
507 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
508 and are rare these days.)
510 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
511 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
515 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
517 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
518 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
519 For Microsoft object file formats (\c{obj}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}),
520 it will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
521 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
522 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\c{aout}, \c{as86},
523 \c{coff}, \c{elf32}, \c{elf64}, \c{ieee}, \c{macho32} and \c{macho64})
524 it will substitute \c{.o}. For \c{dbg}, \c{rdf}, \c{ith} and \c{srec},
525 it will use \c{.dbg}, \c{.rdf}, \c{.ith} and \c{.srec}, respectively,
526 and for the \c{bin} format it will simply remove the extension, so
527 that \c{myfile.asm} produces the output file \c{myfile}.
529 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
530 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
531 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
533 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
534 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
535 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
536 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
537 an intervening space. For example:
539 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
540 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
542 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
543 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
546 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
548 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
549 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
550 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
551 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
552 choose what you want the default to be.
554 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
555 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
557 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
558 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
561 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
563 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
564 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
565 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
566 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
567 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
568 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
571 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
573 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
574 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
575 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
576 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
577 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
580 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
582 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
583 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
585 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
588 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
590 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
591 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
592 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
593 dependency list without a prefix.
596 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
598 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
599 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
601 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
604 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
606 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
607 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
608 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
609 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
610 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
612 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
615 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
617 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
618 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
619 specified by the \c{-o} option.
622 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
624 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
625 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
626 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
630 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
632 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
633 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
634 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
635 file has been removed.
638 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
640 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
641 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
642 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
643 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
644 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
645 if \c{-F} is specified.
647 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
648 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
649 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
651 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
652 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
653 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
656 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
658 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
659 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
660 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
661 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
662 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
665 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
667 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
668 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
670 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
671 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
672 the default and looks like this:
674 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
676 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
677 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
678 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
679 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
680 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
682 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
683 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
685 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
687 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
688 instead of being delimited by colons.
690 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
692 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
694 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
695 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
696 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
697 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
698 example) you want to load them into an editor.
700 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
701 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
702 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
703 the errors into a file by typing
705 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
707 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
708 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
709 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
711 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
713 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
714 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
715 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
716 program, you can type:
718 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
720 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
723 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
725 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
726 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
727 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
728 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
729 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
730 library}, for example, by typing
732 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
734 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
737 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
738 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
739 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
740 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
741 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
742 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
744 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
745 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
746 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
748 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
749 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
750 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
753 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
754 be specified as \c{-I}.
757 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
759 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
760 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
763 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
765 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
766 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
768 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
769 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
772 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
774 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
775 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
776 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
779 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
781 as an alternative to placing the directive
785 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
786 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
787 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
788 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
791 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
792 be specified as \c{-D}.
795 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
797 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
798 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
799 option specified earlier on the command lines.
801 For example, the following command line:
803 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
805 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
806 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
809 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
810 be specified as \c{-U}.
813 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
815 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
816 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
817 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
818 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
819 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
820 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
822 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
823 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
824 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
826 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
828 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
830 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
831 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
832 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
834 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
836 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
837 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
838 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
839 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
840 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
841 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
844 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
846 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
847 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
849 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
850 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
851 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
853 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
854 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
855 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
856 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
858 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
859 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
860 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
861 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatibility with earlier
862 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
863 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
865 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses, and is the default
868 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
869 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
872 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
874 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
875 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
877 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
879 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
880 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
881 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
882 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
883 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
886 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
887 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
888 \c{include}, \c{local})
890 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
892 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
893 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
894 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
895 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
896 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
897 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
900 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
901 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
902 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
903 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
904 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
905 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
906 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
908 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
910 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
911 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
912 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
913 you might want to disable it.
915 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
916 warning class is disabled by default.
918 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
919 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
920 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
922 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
923 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
924 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
925 see \k{syntax} for more information.
927 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
928 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
930 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
931 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
932 This warning class is disabled by default.
934 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
937 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
940 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
943 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
946 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
949 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
952 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
953 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
955 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
956 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
957 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
958 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
959 (without the brackets) exists.
961 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
962 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
963 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
966 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
968 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
969 and the date on which it was compiled.
971 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
973 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
975 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
976 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
977 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
981 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
982 \c ('*' denotes default):
983 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
984 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
987 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
989 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
990 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
991 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
992 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
993 (but not always) likes it.
996 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
998 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
999 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
1000 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
1001 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
1002 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
1004 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
1005 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib\\} will be treated as two separate options.
1006 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
1007 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
1008 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
1009 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
1011 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
1012 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
1013 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
1014 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
1015 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib\\} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
1016 -ic:\\nasmlib\\}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
1018 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
1019 changed with version 0.98.31.
1022 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1024 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1025 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1026 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1027 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1028 skipping this section.
1031 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1033 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1034 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1035 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1036 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1037 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1038 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1039 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1042 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1044 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1045 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1046 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1047 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1048 if you declare, for example,
1053 then the two lines of code
1058 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1059 identical-looking syntaxes.
1061 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1062 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1063 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1064 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1065 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1066 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1067 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1068 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1070 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1071 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1072 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1073 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1074 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1075 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1077 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1078 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1079 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1080 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1081 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1082 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1083 \e{everything} is a label.
1085 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1086 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1087 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1088 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1089 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1090 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1093 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1095 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1096 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1097 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1098 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1099 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1100 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1101 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1103 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1104 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1105 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1106 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1107 the strings being manipulated.
1110 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1112 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1113 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1114 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1115 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1118 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1120 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1121 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1122 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1123 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1124 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1125 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1126 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1127 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1128 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1132 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1134 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1135 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1136 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1137 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1139 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1140 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1141 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1142 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1145 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1147 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1148 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1150 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1151 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1152 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1153 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1154 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1155 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1156 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1158 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1159 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1163 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1165 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1167 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1168 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1169 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1171 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1173 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1174 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1175 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1176 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1178 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1179 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1180 backslash-ended line.
1182 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1183 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1184 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1185 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1186 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1187 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1188 NASM with the command-line option
1189 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1190 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1192 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1193 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1194 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1195 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1196 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1197 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1198 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1199 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1200 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1201 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1203 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1204 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1205 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1206 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1207 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1208 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1209 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1210 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1211 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1212 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1213 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1214 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1215 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1216 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1219 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1220 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1221 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1223 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1224 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1226 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1227 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1228 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1229 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1230 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1231 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1233 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1234 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1235 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1237 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1239 For example, you can code:
1241 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1242 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1244 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1245 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1247 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1248 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1249 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1252 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1254 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1255 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1256 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1257 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1258 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1259 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1260 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1264 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1266 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1267 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1268 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1269 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1271 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1272 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1273 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1274 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1275 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1276 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1277 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1278 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1279 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1280 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1281 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1282 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1283 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1285 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1288 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1290 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1291 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1292 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1293 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1294 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1295 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1296 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1297 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1298 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1302 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1303 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1304 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1305 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1307 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1309 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1310 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1311 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1312 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1315 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1316 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1317 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1318 \c ; actually include at most 512
1320 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1321 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1322 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1323 overridden if desired.
1326 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1328 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1329 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1330 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1331 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1334 \c message db 'hello, world'
1335 \c msglen equ $-message
1337 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1338 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1339 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1340 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1341 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1342 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1345 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1347 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1348 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1349 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1352 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1354 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1355 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1356 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1358 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1359 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1361 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1362 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1363 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1367 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1368 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1369 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1371 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1373 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1374 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1375 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1376 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1377 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1380 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1382 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1383 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1384 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1385 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1390 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1391 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1393 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1394 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1396 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1397 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1399 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1402 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1403 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1406 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1407 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1409 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1410 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1411 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1412 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1413 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1414 bytes to store a zero offset.
1416 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1417 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1418 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1419 default segment registers.
1421 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1422 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1423 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1424 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1425 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1426 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1427 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1428 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1429 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1430 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1431 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1433 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1434 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1435 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1436 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1437 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1438 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1439 the offset to be lost.
1441 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1442 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1443 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1444 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1445 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1446 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1448 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1449 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1450 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1451 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1454 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1456 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1457 character, string and floating-point.
1460 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1462 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1463 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1464 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{D} or \c{T}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} or
1465 \c{Y} for \i{hexadecimal}, \i{decimal}, \i{octal} and \i{binary}
1466 respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x}, for hexadecimal in the style
1467 of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal in the style of Borland
1468 Pascal or Motorola Assemblers. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1469 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1470 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1471 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1472 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0d} or
1473 \c{0t} for decimal, \c{0o} or \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} or \c{0y}
1474 for binary. Please note that unlike C, a \c{0} prefix by itself does
1475 \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1477 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1480 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1482 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1483 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1484 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1485 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1486 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1487 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1488 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1489 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1490 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1491 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1492 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1493 \c mov ax,0q310 ; octal yet again
1494 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1495 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1496 \c mov ax,1100_1000y ; same binary constant once more
1497 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1498 \c mov ax,0y1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1500 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1502 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1503 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1504 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1505 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1506 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1507 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1508 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1511 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1513 \c \' single quote (')
1514 \c \" double quote (")
1516 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1517 \c \? question mark (?)
1525 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1526 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1527 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1528 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1529 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1531 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1532 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1535 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1536 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1538 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1539 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1540 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1543 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1545 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1546 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1548 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1549 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1553 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1554 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1555 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1556 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1557 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1560 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1562 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1563 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1564 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1565 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1566 certain preprocessor directives.
1568 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1569 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1570 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1572 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1573 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1575 And the following are also equivalent:
1577 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1578 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1579 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1581 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1582 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1583 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1584 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1585 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1586 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1588 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1590 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1591 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1592 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1596 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1597 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1599 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1600 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1602 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1603 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1604 an expression context.
1606 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1608 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1609 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1610 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1611 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1612 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1613 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1615 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1616 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1617 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1618 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1619 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant.
1621 NASM also support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x},
1622 hexadecimal digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then
1623 optionally a \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent
1624 in decimal notation. As an extension, NASM additionally supports the
1625 \c{0h} and \c{$} prefixes for hexadecimal, as well binary and octal
1626 floating-point, using the \c{0b} or \c{0y} and \c{0o} or \c{0q}
1627 prefixes, respectively.
1629 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1630 floating-point constants as well.
1634 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1635 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1636 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1637 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1638 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1639 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1640 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1641 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1642 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1643 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1644 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1646 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1647 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1648 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1649 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1650 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1652 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1653 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1654 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1655 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1656 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1657 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1658 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1659 floating-point number, respectively.
1663 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1665 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1666 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1668 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1670 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1671 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1672 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1673 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1674 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1675 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1676 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1677 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1678 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1680 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1681 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1682 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1683 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1685 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1686 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1688 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1690 The \c{%use fp} standard macro package contains a set of convenience
1691 macros. See \k{pkg_fp}.
1693 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1695 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1696 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1697 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1699 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1704 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1705 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1710 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1712 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1713 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1716 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1717 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1718 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1719 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1720 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1721 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1722 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1724 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1725 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1728 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1730 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1731 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1732 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1735 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1737 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1740 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1742 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1745 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1747 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1748 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1749 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1750 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1751 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1754 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1755 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1757 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1761 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1762 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1764 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1765 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1766 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1767 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1768 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1770 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1771 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1773 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1774 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1775 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1778 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1779 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1781 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1782 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1783 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1784 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1785 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1786 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1789 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1791 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1792 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1793 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1794 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1796 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1797 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1798 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1800 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1804 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1806 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1807 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1808 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1809 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1810 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1812 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1814 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1816 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1817 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1819 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1820 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1821 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1822 could code either of
1824 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1825 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1827 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1828 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1831 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1832 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1833 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1835 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1838 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1840 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1841 invent one using the macro processor.
1844 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1846 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1847 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1848 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1849 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1850 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1851 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1852 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1856 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1858 \c push strict dword 33
1860 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1863 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1864 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1867 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1869 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1870 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1871 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1873 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1874 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1875 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1876 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1877 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1879 \c times (label-$) db 0
1880 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1882 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1883 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1884 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1885 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1888 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1889 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1891 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1894 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1895 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1896 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1897 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1898 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1900 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1902 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1903 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1904 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1905 label. So, for example:
1907 \c label1 ; some code
1915 \c label2 ; some code
1923 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1924 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1925 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1926 previous non-local label.
1928 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1929 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1930 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1931 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1932 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1933 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1934 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1937 \c label3 ; some more code
1942 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1943 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1944 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1945 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1946 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1947 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1948 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1949 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1950 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1951 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1953 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1954 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1955 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1956 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1957 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1959 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1961 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1962 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1963 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}),
1964 \c{..imagebase} is used to find out the offset from a base address
1965 of the current image in the \c{win64} output format (see \k{win64pic}).
1966 So just keep in mind that symbols beginning with a double period are
1970 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1972 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1973 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1974 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1975 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1978 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1979 character into a single line. Thus:
1981 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1984 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1987 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1989 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1991 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1992 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1995 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1996 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1998 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
2000 which will expand to
2002 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
2004 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
2005 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
2006 not at definition time. Thus the code
2008 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
2013 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
2014 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
2016 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
2017 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
2018 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
2019 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
2020 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
2021 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
2024 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
2025 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
2026 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
2027 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
2030 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
2034 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
2035 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
2036 for an example of its use.
2038 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2039 macros: if you write
2041 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2042 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2044 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2045 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2046 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2051 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2052 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2053 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2055 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2056 perfectly well define a macro with
2060 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2064 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2065 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2066 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2068 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2069 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2072 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2074 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2075 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2076 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2077 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2078 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2080 Suppose you have the following code:
2083 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2092 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2093 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2094 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2095 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2096 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2099 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2100 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2101 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2103 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2104 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2105 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2109 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2113 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2114 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2115 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2118 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2120 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2121 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2122 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2123 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2125 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2127 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2128 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2130 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2131 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2133 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2135 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2136 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2139 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2141 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2142 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2143 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2145 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2146 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2148 As an example, consider the following:
2150 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2152 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2158 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2161 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2162 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2164 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2165 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2167 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2169 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2171 Now the above code can be written as:
2173 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2174 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2176 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2177 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2180 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2182 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2183 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2184 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2185 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2186 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2187 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2191 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2203 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2205 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2206 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2208 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2211 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2213 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2214 example, the following sequence:
2221 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2222 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2224 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2225 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2229 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2231 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2232 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2233 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2234 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2236 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2237 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2238 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2239 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2241 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2242 later, so you can do things like
2246 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2248 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2249 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2250 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2252 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2253 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2254 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2255 involving a register).
2258 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2260 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2261 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2262 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2267 \c %defstr test TEST
2271 \c %define test 'TEST'
2273 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2276 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2279 \S{deftok} Defining Tokens: \I\c{%ideftok}\i\c{%deftok}
2281 \c{%deftok}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ideftok}, define
2282 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2283 second parameter, after string conversion, to a sequence of tokens.
2287 \c %deftok test 'TEST'
2291 \c %define test TEST
2294 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2296 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2297 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2298 more complex operations can be constructed.
2300 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2301 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2302 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2303 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2305 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2307 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2308 a single-line macro.
2312 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2314 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2317 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2319 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2321 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2324 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2326 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2329 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2331 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2332 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2333 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2334 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2336 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2337 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2339 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2340 assigned the value of 9.
2343 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2345 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2346 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2347 than the description:
2349 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2350 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2351 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2352 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2353 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2354 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2356 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2357 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2358 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2359 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2360 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2361 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2362 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2363 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2364 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2367 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2369 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2370 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2373 \c %macro prologue 1
2381 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2382 invoke the macro with a call such as
2384 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2386 which would expand to the three lines of code
2392 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2393 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2394 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2395 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2396 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2399 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2400 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2402 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2403 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2404 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2413 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2414 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2415 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2418 \S{mlrmacro} \i{Recursive Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%irmacro}\i\c{%rmacro}
2420 A multi-line macro cannot be referenced within itself, in order to
2421 prevent accidental infinite recursion and allow instruction overloading.
2423 Recursive multi-line macros allow for self-referencing, with the
2424 caveat that the user is aware of the existence, use and purpose of
2425 recursive multi-line macros. There is also a generous, but sane, upper
2426 limit to the number of recursions, in order to prevent run-away memory
2427 consumption in case of accidental infinite recursion.
2429 As with non-recursive multi-line macros, recursive multi-line macros are
2430 \i{case-sensitive}, unless you define them using the alternative
2431 directive \c{%irmacro}.
2434 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2436 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2437 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2438 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2439 parameters at all. So you could define
2441 \c %macro prologue 0
2448 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2449 allocates no local stack space.
2451 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2452 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2461 so that you could code
2463 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2464 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2466 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2467 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2468 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2469 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2470 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2471 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2474 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2476 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2477 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2478 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2479 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2480 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2481 flag is set by doing this:
2491 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2492 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2493 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2494 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2495 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2496 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2497 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2498 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2499 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2502 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2504 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2505 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2506 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2507 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2508 you might want to be able to write
2510 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2512 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2513 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2514 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2515 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2518 \c %macro writefile 2+
2524 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2531 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2532 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2533 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2534 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2537 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2538 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2541 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2542 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2543 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2544 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2545 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2546 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2547 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2550 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2551 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2554 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2556 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2557 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2560 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2562 \S{mlmacrange} \i{Macro Parameters Range}
2564 NASM allows you to expand parameters via special construction \c{%\{x:y\}}
2565 where \c{x} is the first parameter index and \c{y} is the last. Any index can
2566 be either negative or positive but must never be zero.
2576 expands to \c{3,4,5} range.
2578 Even more, the parameters can be reversed so that
2586 expands to \c{5,4,3} range.
2588 But even this is not the last. The parameters can be addressed via negative
2589 indices so NASM will count them reversed. The ones who know Python may see
2598 expands to \c{6,5,4} range.
2600 Note that NASM uses \i{comma} to separate parameters being expanded.
2602 By the way, here is a trick - you might use the index \c{%{-1:-1}}
2603 which gives you the \i{last} argument passed to a macro.
2605 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2607 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2608 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2609 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2611 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2619 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2620 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2621 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2622 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2623 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2625 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2626 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2627 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2628 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2630 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2632 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2633 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2634 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2635 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2637 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2638 too many default parameters:
2640 \c %macro quux 1 something
2642 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2644 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2645 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2646 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2647 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2648 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2650 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2651 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2652 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2653 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2654 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2656 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2657 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2658 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2660 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2662 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2663 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2664 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2667 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2669 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2670 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2671 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2672 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2673 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2674 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2677 \S{percent00} \i\c{%00}: \I{label preceeding macro}Label Preceeding Macro
2679 \c{%00} will return the label preceeding the macro invocation, if any. The
2680 label must be on the same line as the macro invocation, may be a local label
2681 (see \k{locallab}), and need not end in a colon.
2684 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2686 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2687 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2688 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2689 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2690 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2691 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2693 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2694 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2695 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2696 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2698 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2699 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2700 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2701 parameters are rotated to the right.
2703 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2704 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2706 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2715 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2716 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2717 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2718 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2719 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2720 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2721 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2723 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2724 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2725 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2727 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2728 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2729 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2730 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2731 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2732 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2733 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2735 This can be done by the following definition:
2737 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2746 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2747 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2748 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2749 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2750 iterated through in reverse order.
2753 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2755 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2756 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2757 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2758 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2759 table, you could code something like
2761 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2763 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2769 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2770 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2771 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2773 which would expand to
2776 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2778 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2780 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2783 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2784 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2786 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2787 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2788 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2789 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2790 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2791 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2792 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2794 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2795 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2796 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2797 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2798 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2799 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2800 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2801 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2802 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2803 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2805 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2806 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2807 purpose of concatenation.
2809 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2812 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2814 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2815 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2816 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2817 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2818 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2819 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2822 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2823 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2824 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2825 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2835 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2836 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2837 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2840 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2841 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2842 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2843 because no inverse condition code exists.
2846 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2848 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2849 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2850 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2851 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2852 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2855 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2856 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2857 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2858 the number of parameters, like this:
2860 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2864 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2866 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2868 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2869 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2870 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2871 that argument specification.
2880 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2887 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2888 specification does not match exactly.
2891 \S{exitmacro} Exiting Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%exitmacro}
2893 Multi-line macro expansions can be arbitrarily terminated with
2894 the \c{%exitmacro} directive.
2907 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2909 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2910 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2911 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2914 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2915 \c %elif<condition2>
2916 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2918 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2921 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2923 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2924 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2926 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2927 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2928 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2929 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2931 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2932 single-line macro existence}
2934 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2935 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2936 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2937 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2939 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2942 \c ; perform some function
2944 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2946 \c ; go and do something else
2948 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2949 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2950 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2952 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2953 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2954 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2958 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2959 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2961 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2962 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2964 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2965 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2966 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2969 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2970 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2972 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2974 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2978 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2980 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2986 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2987 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2990 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2991 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2992 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2995 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2998 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2999 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
3000 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
3001 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
3002 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
3004 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
3005 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
3008 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
3009 arbitrary numeric expressions}
3011 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
3012 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
3013 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
3014 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
3015 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
3017 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
3018 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
3020 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
3021 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
3022 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
3023 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
3024 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
3025 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
3026 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
3027 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
3028 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
3029 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
3030 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
3031 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
3032 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
3033 for true and 0 for false.
3035 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
3036 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
3038 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
3039 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
3041 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
3042 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
3043 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
3044 Differences in white space are not counted.
3046 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
3048 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
3049 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
3051 \c %macro pushparam 1
3062 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
3063 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
3064 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
3065 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
3067 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
3068 Types\I{testing, token types}
3070 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
3071 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
3072 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
3073 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
3076 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
3077 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
3078 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
3079 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
3080 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
3082 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
3083 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
3085 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
3094 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
3095 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
3106 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
3107 the following two ways:
3109 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
3110 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
3112 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
3113 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
3114 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
3115 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
3117 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
3118 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
3119 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
3120 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
3121 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
3123 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
3124 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
3125 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
3126 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
3128 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
3130 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
3131 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
3132 versus a multi-token sequence.
3134 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3135 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3136 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3142 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3146 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3147 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3149 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3150 variants are also provided.
3152 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3154 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3155 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3156 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3158 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3159 variants are also provided.
3161 \S{ifenv} \i\c{%ifenv}: Test If Environment Variable Exists
3163 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifenv} assembles the
3164 subsequent code if and only if the environment variable referenced by
3165 the \c{%!<env>} directive exists.
3167 The usual \i\c{%elifenv}, \i\c\{%ifnenv}, and \i\c{%elifnenv}
3168 variants are also provided.
3170 Just as for \c{%!<env>} the argument should be written as a string if
3171 it contains characters that would not be legal in an identifier. See
3174 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3176 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3177 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3178 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3179 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3181 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3182 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3183 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3184 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3188 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3192 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3193 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3196 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3197 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3198 terminate the loop, like this:
3213 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3215 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3216 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3217 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3218 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3219 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3220 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3222 Note a maximum repeat count is limited by 62 bit number, though it
3223 is hardly possible that you ever need anything bigger.
3226 \H{while} \i{Conditional Loops}: \i\c{%while}
3228 The directives \c{%while} and \i\c{%endwhile} combine preprocessor
3229 loops with conditional assembly, allowing the enclosed chunk of
3230 code to be replicated as long as certain conditions are met:
3232 \c %while<condition>
3233 \c ; some code which only repeats while <condition> is met
3236 \S{exitwhile} Exiting Conditional Loops: \i\c{%exitwhile}
3238 Conditional loops can be arbitrarily terminated with the
3239 \i\c{%exitwhile} directive.
3243 \c %while<condition>
3244 \c %if<some other condition>
3247 \c ; some code which only repeats while <condition> is met
3251 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3253 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3255 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3257 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3258 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3259 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3261 \c %include "macros.mac"
3263 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3264 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3266 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3267 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3268 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3269 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3270 line using the \c{-i} option.
3272 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3273 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3276 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3277 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3278 \c ; now define some macros
3281 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3282 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3283 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3285 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3286 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3287 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3290 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3292 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3293 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3294 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3295 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3299 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3301 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3302 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3305 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3307 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3308 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3309 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3311 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3312 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3313 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3315 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3316 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3321 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3322 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3323 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3326 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3328 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3329 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3330 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3331 described in \k{macropkg}.
3333 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3334 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3335 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3336 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3341 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3342 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3343 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3345 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3347 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3348 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3349 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3350 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3351 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3352 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3353 able to nest these loops.
3355 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3356 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3357 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3358 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3359 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3362 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3363 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3365 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3366 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3367 which is the name of the context. For example:
3371 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3372 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3373 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3374 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3375 single macro definition.)
3377 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3378 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3379 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3380 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3383 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3385 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3386 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3387 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3388 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3389 above could be implemented by means of:
3405 and invoked by means of, for example,
3413 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3416 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3417 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3418 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3421 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3423 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3424 a particular context, in just the same way:
3426 \c %define %$localmac 3
3428 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3429 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3430 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3433 \S{ctxfallthrough} \i{Context Fall-Through Lookup}
3435 Context fall-through lookup (automatic searching of outer contexts)
3436 is a feature that was added in NASM version 0.98.03. Unfortunately,
3437 this feature is unintuitive and can result in buggy code that would
3438 have otherwise been prevented by NASM's error reporting. As a result,
3439 this feature has been \e{deprecated}. NASM version 2.09 will issue a
3440 warning when usage of this \e{deprecated} feature is detected. Starting
3441 with NASM version 2.10, usage of this \e{deprecated} feature will simply
3442 result in an \e{expression syntax error}.
3444 An example usage of this \e{deprecated} feature follows:
3448 \c %assign %$external 1
3450 \c %assign %$internal 1
3451 \c mov eax, %$external
3452 \c mov eax, %$internal
3457 As demonstrated, \c{%$external} is being defined in the \c{ctx1}
3458 context and referenced within the \c{ctx2} context. With context
3459 fall-through lookup, referencing an undefined context-local macro
3460 like this implicitly searches through all outer contexts until a match
3461 is made or isn't found in any context. As a result, \c{%$external}
3462 referenced within the \c{ctx2} context would implicitly use \c{%$external}
3463 as defined in \c{ctx1}. Most people would expect NASM to issue an error in
3464 this situation because \c{%$external} was never defined within \c{ctx2} and also
3465 isn't qualified with the proper context depth, \c{%$$external}.
3467 Here is a revision of the above example with proper context depth:
3471 \c %assign %$external 1
3473 \c %assign %$internal 1
3474 \c mov eax, %$$external
3475 \c mov eax, %$internal
3480 As demonstrated, \c{%$external} is still being defined in the \c{ctx1}
3481 context and referenced within the \c{ctx2} context. However, the
3482 reference to \c{%$external} within \c{ctx2} has been fully qualified with
3483 the proper context depth, \c{%$$external}, and thus is no longer ambiguous,
3484 unintuitive or erroneous.
3487 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3489 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3490 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3491 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3492 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3493 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3495 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3496 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3497 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3502 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3505 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3507 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3508 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3509 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3525 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3539 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3544 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3545 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3546 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3547 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3550 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3551 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3552 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3553 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3554 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3556 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3557 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3558 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3559 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3560 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3562 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3584 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3585 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3586 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3587 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3590 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3592 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3593 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3595 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3597 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3599 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3602 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3604 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3605 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3606 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3608 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3609 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3610 convenient to use and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3611 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3615 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3616 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3617 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3624 \c %pop ; restore original context
3626 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3627 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3628 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3629 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3632 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3634 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3635 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3636 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3637 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3638 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3642 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3643 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3644 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3646 \c %stacksize flat64
3648 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3649 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3650 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3654 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3655 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3656 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3660 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3661 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3662 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3663 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3664 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3665 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3666 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3670 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3672 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3673 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3674 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3675 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3676 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3677 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3678 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3680 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3681 An example of its use is the following:
3685 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3686 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3687 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3688 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3690 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3691 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3692 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3697 \c leave ; restore old bp
3700 \c %pop ; restore original context
3702 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3703 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3704 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3705 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3706 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3707 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3708 as shown in the example.
3711 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3713 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3714 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3715 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3716 right macros by means of code like this:
3721 \c ; do some different setup
3723 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3726 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3727 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3728 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3729 knowing what went wrong.
3731 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3736 \c ; do some different setup
3738 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3742 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3743 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3744 depend on symbol values.
3746 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3747 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3748 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3751 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3752 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3753 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3754 the user. For example:
3757 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3758 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3762 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3764 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3765 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3767 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3768 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3770 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3771 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3773 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3775 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3776 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3777 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3778 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3779 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3780 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3783 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3784 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3785 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3787 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3789 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3790 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3791 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3792 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3793 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3794 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3796 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3797 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3801 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3803 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3804 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3805 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3806 could be used at some other point in your code.
3808 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3809 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3810 could do that as follows:
3812 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3814 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3816 If the name of the environment variable contains non-identifier
3817 characters, you can use string quotes to surround the name of the
3818 variable, for example:
3820 \c %defstr C_colon %!'C:'
3823 \S{final} \i\c{%final} Directive
3825 The \c{%final} directive is used to delay preprocessing of a line
3826 until all other "normal" preprocessing is complete. Multiple
3827 \c{%final} directives are processed in the opposite order of their
3828 declaration, last one first and first one last.
3831 \H{comment} Comment Blocks: \i\c{%comment}
3833 The \c{%comment} and \c{%endcomment} directives are used to specify
3834 a block of commented (i.e. unprocessed) code/text. Everything between
3835 \c{%comment} and \c{%endcomment} will be ignored by the preprocessor.
3838 \c ; some code, text or data to be ignored
3842 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3844 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3845 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3846 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3847 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3848 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3850 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3851 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3852 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3856 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3858 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3859 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3860 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3861 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3862 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3863 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3864 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3866 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3867 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3870 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3872 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3873 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3874 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3875 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3876 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3877 would be equivalent to:
3885 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3886 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3887 values will be present in memory.
3890 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3892 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3893 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3902 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3904 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3905 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3906 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3907 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3908 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3909 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3911 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3912 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3913 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3914 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3915 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3916 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3917 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3918 here'. You could then write a macro
3920 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3929 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3930 find the crash point.
3933 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3935 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3936 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3937 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3938 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3939 mode-dependent macros.
3941 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3943 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3944 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3947 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3948 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3949 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3950 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3954 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3956 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3959 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3960 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3963 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3964 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3965 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3967 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3968 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3969 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3970 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3972 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3973 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3974 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3975 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3978 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3979 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3980 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3981 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3982 local time as if it was UTC.
3984 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3985 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3986 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3987 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3988 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3991 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3992 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3993 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3994 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3995 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3996 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3997 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3998 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3999 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
4002 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
4005 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
4006 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
4007 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
4008 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
4010 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
4011 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
4014 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
4016 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
4017 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
4018 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
4019 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
4021 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
4022 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
4023 change in future versions of NASM.}
4026 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
4028 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
4029 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
4030 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
4031 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
4033 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
4034 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
4035 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
4036 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
4037 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
4038 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
4039 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
4040 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
4043 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
4044 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
4055 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
4056 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
4057 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
4058 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
4060 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
4061 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
4062 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
4063 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
4074 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
4075 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
4077 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
4078 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
4079 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
4080 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
4081 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
4082 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
4083 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
4085 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
4086 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
4092 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
4094 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
4096 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
4099 \c struc mytype, -40
4101 And access an element this way:
4103 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
4106 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
4107 \i{Instances of Structures}
4109 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
4110 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
4111 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
4112 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
4113 you code something like this:
4118 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
4119 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
4120 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
4121 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
4125 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
4126 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
4127 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
4128 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
4129 they were specified in the structure definition.
4131 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
4132 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
4133 the \c{AT} line. For example:
4135 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
4138 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
4139 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
4143 \c db 'hello, world'
4147 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
4149 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
4150 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
4151 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
4152 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
4154 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
4155 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
4156 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
4157 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
4158 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
4160 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
4161 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
4162 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
4163 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
4164 perform the alignment.
4166 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
4167 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
4168 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
4169 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
4170 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
4171 except for special purposes.
4173 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
4174 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
4175 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
4176 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
4179 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
4180 be used within structure definitions:
4197 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
4198 relative to the base of the structure.
4200 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
4201 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
4202 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
4203 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
4204 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
4205 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
4206 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
4208 Both \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} do call \c{SECTALIGN} macro implicitly.
4209 See \k{sectalign} for details.
4211 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
4214 \S{sectalign} \i\c{SECTALIGN}: Section Alignment
4216 The \c{SECTALIGN} macros provides a way to modify alignment attribute
4217 of output file section. Unlike the \c{align=} attribute (which is allowed
4218 at section definition only) the \c{SECTALIGN} macro may be used at any time.
4220 For example the directive
4224 sets the section alignment requirements to 16 bytes. Once increased it can
4225 not be decreased, the magnitude may grow only.
4227 Note that \c{ALIGN} (see \k{align}) calls the \c{SECTALIGN} macro implicitly
4228 so the active section alignment requirements may be updated. This is by default
4229 behaviour, if for some reason you want the \c{ALIGN} do not call \c{SECTALIGN}
4230 at all use the directive
4234 It is still possible to turn in on again by
4239 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
4241 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
4242 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
4243 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
4244 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
4246 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
4250 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
4252 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
4253 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
4254 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
4255 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
4256 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
4257 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
4264 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
4270 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
4272 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
4273 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
4274 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
4275 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
4276 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
4277 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
4278 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
4281 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4282 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4283 and an optional jump threshold override. If (for any reason) you need
4284 to turn off the jump completely just set jump threshold value to -1
4285 (or set it to \c{nojmp}). The following modes are possible:
4287 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4288 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4291 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4292 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4293 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4295 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4296 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4299 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4300 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4303 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4304 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4305 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4306 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4308 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4309 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4310 are used internally by this macro package.
4313 \H{pkg_fp} \i\c\{fp}: Floating-point macros
4315 This packages contains the following floating-point convenience macros:
4317 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
4318 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
4319 \c %define QNaN __QNaN__
4320 \c %define SNaN __SNaN__
4322 \c %define float8(x) __float8__(x)
4323 \c %define float16(x) __float16__(x)
4324 \c %define float32(x) __float32__(x)
4325 \c %define float64(x) __float64__(x)
4326 \c %define float80m(x) __float80m__(x)
4327 \c %define float80e(x) __float80e__(x)
4328 \c %define float128l(x) __float128l__(x)
4329 \c %define float128h(x) __float128h__(x)
4332 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4334 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4335 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4336 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4338 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4339 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4340 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4341 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4342 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4343 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4345 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4348 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4349 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4350 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4351 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4352 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4355 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4357 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4358 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4359 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4360 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4362 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4363 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4364 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4365 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4366 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4367 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4368 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4369 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4371 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4372 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4373 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4374 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4375 device drivers and boot loader software.
4377 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4378 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4379 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4380 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4382 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4383 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4384 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4385 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4386 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4389 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4390 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4391 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4393 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4394 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4395 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4396 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4397 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4400 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4401 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4402 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4403 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4406 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4407 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4408 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4410 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4412 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4414 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4415 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4418 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4420 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4421 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4422 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4423 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4426 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4427 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4428 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4429 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4430 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4431 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4433 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4434 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4435 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4436 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4438 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4440 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4443 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4444 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4445 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4446 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4447 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4448 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4449 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4452 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4453 \k{multisec}, all support
4454 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4455 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4456 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4457 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4461 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4463 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4464 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4465 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4466 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4467 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4468 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4469 it. So the user-level directive
4473 expands to the two lines
4475 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4478 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4479 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4480 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4482 \c %macro writefile 2+
4492 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4499 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4500 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4501 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4502 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4503 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4504 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4505 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4506 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4507 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4508 code in any of several separate code sections.
4511 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4513 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4514 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4515 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4516 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4517 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4519 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4527 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4528 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4529 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4531 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4532 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4534 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4535 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4537 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4538 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4539 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4540 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4542 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4544 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4546 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4548 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4552 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4553 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4557 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4558 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4559 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4560 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4561 needs to be made resident.
4564 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4566 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4567 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4568 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4569 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4570 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4571 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4573 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4574 argument is the name of a symbol:
4577 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4579 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4580 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4581 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4582 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4583 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4584 by means of the directive
4586 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4588 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4589 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4590 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4592 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4593 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4594 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4597 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4599 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4600 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4601 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4602 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4603 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4605 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4606 the definition of the symbol.
4608 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4609 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4610 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4616 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4617 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4618 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4621 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4623 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4624 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4628 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4630 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4631 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4632 uninitialized data section, so that
4636 is similar in function to
4643 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4644 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4645 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4646 at the same piece of memory.
4648 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4649 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4650 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4651 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4653 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4654 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4656 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4657 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4658 only one argument at a time.
4661 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4663 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4664 are available on the specified CPU.
4668 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4670 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4672 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4674 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4676 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4678 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4680 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4682 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4684 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4686 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4688 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4690 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4692 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4694 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4696 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4698 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4700 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4702 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4703 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4704 instructions are available.
4707 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4709 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4710 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4713 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4715 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4717 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4719 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4721 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4723 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4725 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4727 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4728 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4729 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4731 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4732 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4735 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4737 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4738 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4739 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4740 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4741 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4742 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4744 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4745 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4746 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4747 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4748 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4749 The extensions are given with each format below.
4752 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4754 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4755 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4756 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4757 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4758 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4761 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4762 how NASM handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4764 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4765 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4766 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4767 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4769 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4770 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4771 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4772 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4775 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4777 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4778 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4779 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4780 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4782 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4789 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4790 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4791 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4792 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4793 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4794 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4795 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4798 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4799 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4801 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4802 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4803 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4804 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4806 \c section .data align=16
4808 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4809 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4811 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4812 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4813 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4814 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4817 \S{multisec} \i{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} Support for the \c{bin} Format
4819 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4820 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4822 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4823 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4826 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4827 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4830 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4831 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4834 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4835 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4838 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4839 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4840 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4842 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4843 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4845 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4848 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4849 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4852 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4853 alignment has been specified.
4855 \b Sections may not overlap.
4857 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4858 which may be used in your code.
4860 \S{map}\i{Map Files}
4862 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4863 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4864 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4865 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4866 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4867 brackets must be used.
4870 \H{ithfmt} \i\c{ith}: \i{Intel Hex} Output
4872 The \c{ith} file format produces Intel hex-format files. Just as the
4873 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4874 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4877 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4878 the \c{ith} file format.
4880 \c{ith} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.ith}.
4883 \H{srecfmt} \i\c{srec}: \i{Motorola S-Records} Output
4885 The \c{srec} file format produces Motorola S-records files. Just as the
4886 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4887 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4890 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4891 the \c{srec} file format.
4893 \c{srec} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.srec}.
4896 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4898 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4899 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4900 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4901 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4903 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4905 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4906 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4907 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4908 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4911 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4912 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4913 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4915 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4916 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4917 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4919 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4920 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4921 address of the segment. So, for example:
4930 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4931 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4932 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4935 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4936 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4941 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4943 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4945 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4946 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4949 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4950 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4952 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4953 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4954 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4955 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4957 \c segment code private align=16
4959 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4960 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4961 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4963 The available qualifiers are:
4965 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4966 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4967 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4968 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4969 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4970 than stuck end-to-end.
4972 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4973 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4974 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4975 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4976 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4977 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4978 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4979 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4980 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4982 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4983 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4984 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4985 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4987 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4988 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4989 overlay-capable linker.
4991 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4992 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4993 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4994 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4996 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4997 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4998 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4999 defines the group if it is not already defined.
5001 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
5002 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
5003 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
5004 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
5005 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
5006 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
5008 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
5009 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
5012 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
5014 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
5015 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
5016 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
5025 \c ; some uninitialized data
5027 \c group dgroup data bss
5029 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
5030 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
5031 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
5032 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
5033 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
5036 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
5037 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
5038 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
5039 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
5040 base rather than the segment base.
5042 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
5043 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
5044 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
5045 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
5047 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
5048 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
5049 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
5050 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
5053 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
5055 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
5056 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
5057 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
5058 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
5059 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
5060 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
5061 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
5063 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
5066 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
5067 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
5069 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
5070 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
5071 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
5072 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
5074 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
5075 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
5076 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
5079 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
5081 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
5082 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
5083 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
5084 once you have imported it. For example:
5086 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
5089 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
5090 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
5092 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
5093 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
5094 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
5095 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
5097 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
5098 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
5099 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
5100 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
5101 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
5102 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
5105 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
5106 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
5107 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
5108 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
5109 available attributes are:
5111 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
5112 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
5113 frequently used symbols imported by name.
5115 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
5116 does not make use of any initialized data.
5118 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
5119 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
5120 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
5122 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
5123 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
5129 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
5130 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
5131 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
5134 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
5137 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
5138 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
5139 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
5140 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
5141 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
5145 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
5146 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
5148 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
5152 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
5153 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
5154 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
5155 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
5157 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
5158 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
5159 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
5161 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
5162 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
5163 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
5166 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
5168 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
5169 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
5172 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
5174 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
5175 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
5176 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
5179 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
5180 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
5181 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
5185 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
5186 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
5188 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
5189 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
5190 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
5192 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
5193 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
5195 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
5196 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
5197 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
5198 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
5199 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
5201 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
5202 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
5203 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
5204 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
5205 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
5208 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
5209 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
5211 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
5212 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
5213 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
5214 declarations could equivalently be
5216 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
5217 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
5219 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
5220 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
5221 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
5223 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
5224 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
5225 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
5228 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
5230 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
5231 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
5232 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
5233 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
5235 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
5237 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
5238 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
5239 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
5240 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
5241 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
5242 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
5243 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
5244 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
5247 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5248 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
5250 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
5251 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5252 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5253 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
5254 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
5257 The available qualifiers are:
5259 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
5260 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
5261 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
5264 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
5265 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
5266 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
5267 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
5269 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
5270 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
5273 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
5274 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
5275 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
5276 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
5277 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
5280 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5281 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
5282 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
5283 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
5284 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
5285 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
5286 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
5287 for data (and BSS) sections.
5288 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
5289 alignment), though the value does not matter.
5291 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5294 \c section .text code align=16
5295 \c section .data data align=4
5296 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
5297 \c section .bss bss align=4
5299 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
5301 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
5303 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
5304 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
5305 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
5306 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
5307 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
5308 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
5309 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
5310 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
5311 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
5312 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
5313 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
5314 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
5315 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
5317 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
5318 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
5319 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
5321 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
5323 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
5325 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
5326 line to source code:
5330 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5331 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5332 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5333 still be perfectly possible.
5335 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5336 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5337 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5338 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5339 table." Its typical use would be:
5342 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5343 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5344 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5347 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5348 \c push DWORD caption
5351 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5352 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5353 \c ; for exception handler
5357 \c push DWORD handler
5358 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5359 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5361 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5362 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5365 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5366 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5368 \c section .drectve info
5369 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5371 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5372 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5373 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5374 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5375 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5376 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5377 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5378 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5379 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5380 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5381 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5382 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5383 caused application failure.
5385 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5386 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5387 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5388 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5389 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5392 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5394 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5395 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5396 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5397 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5398 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5400 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5402 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5403 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5404 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5406 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5412 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5413 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5414 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5415 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5418 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5419 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5421 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5422 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5423 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5424 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5425 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5426 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5427 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5428 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5429 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5431 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5432 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5435 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5439 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5440 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5441 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5442 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5443 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5444 these image-relative references:
5446 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5447 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5448 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5452 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5453 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5455 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5456 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5457 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5458 become apparent in next paragraph.
5460 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5463 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5464 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5465 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5466 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5468 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5470 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5471 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5472 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5473 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5474 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5475 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5476 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5477 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5478 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5479 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5480 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5483 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5484 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5485 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5486 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5487 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5488 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5489 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5490 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5491 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5492 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5493 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5494 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5495 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5496 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5497 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5498 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5499 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5500 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5501 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5502 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5503 no, no trace of failure is left.
5505 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5506 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5507 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5508 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5509 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5510 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5511 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5512 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5513 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5514 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5515 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5516 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5517 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5518 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5519 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5520 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5521 terminating the application.
5523 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5524 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5525 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5526 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5527 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5532 \c extern MessageBoxA
5538 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5540 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5541 \c ; for exception handler
5547 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5550 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5551 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5553 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5554 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5555 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5556 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5557 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5558 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5559 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5560 \c section .drectve info
5561 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5563 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5564 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5565 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5566 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5567 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5568 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5569 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5570 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5571 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5572 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5573 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5574 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5575 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5576 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5578 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5579 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5580 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5581 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5582 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5583 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5584 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5585 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5586 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5587 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5588 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5589 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5590 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5591 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5592 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5595 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5596 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5599 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5602 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5603 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5604 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5607 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5608 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5609 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5610 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5611 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5614 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5615 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5616 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5617 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5618 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5620 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5621 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5623 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5624 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5626 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5627 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5628 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5629 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5631 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5633 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5634 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5635 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5636 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5637 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5640 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5641 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5644 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5646 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5647 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5649 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5651 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5652 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5653 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5655 \H{machofmt} \I{Mach-O}\i\c{macho32} and \i\c{macho64}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5657 The \c{macho32} and \c{macho64} output formts produces \c{Mach-O}
5658 object files suitable for linking with the \i{MacOS X} linker.
5659 \i\c{macho} is a synonym for \c{macho32}.
5661 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5663 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf32} and \i\c{elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5664 Format} Object Files
5666 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5667 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5668 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5669 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5671 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5673 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5674 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5675 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5676 most systems which support ELF.
5678 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5679 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5681 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5682 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5683 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5684 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5685 names}, but may still be
5686 overridden by these qualifiers.
5688 The available qualifiers are:
5690 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5691 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5692 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5694 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5695 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5698 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5699 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5702 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5703 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5704 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5705 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5707 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5708 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5709 requirements of the section.
5711 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5712 thread local variables.
5714 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5717 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5718 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5720 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5721 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5722 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5723 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5724 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5725 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5726 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5727 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5728 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5729 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5730 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5732 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5733 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5734 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5737 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5738 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5740 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5741 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5742 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5743 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5744 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5746 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5747 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5748 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5749 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5752 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5753 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5754 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5755 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5757 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5758 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5759 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5760 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5761 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5762 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5764 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5765 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5766 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5767 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5769 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5770 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5771 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5772 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5773 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5774 address of the symbol.
5776 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5777 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5778 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5779 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5780 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5781 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5784 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5785 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5786 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5787 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5788 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5789 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5791 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5792 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5794 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5795 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5797 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5798 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5799 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5800 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5801 of the symbol with code such as:
5803 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5807 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5808 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5809 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5810 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5811 of the symbol with code such as:
5813 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5817 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5818 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5820 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5821 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5822 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5823 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5824 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5825 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5826 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5827 to specify these features.
5829 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5830 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5831 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5832 \c{data}.) For example:
5834 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5836 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5837 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5839 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5840 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5841 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5842 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5844 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5846 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5847 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5848 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5850 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5853 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5856 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5857 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5859 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5860 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5864 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5865 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5867 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5868 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5869 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5870 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5871 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5872 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5874 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5876 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5877 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5880 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5881 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5883 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5884 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5885 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5886 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5887 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5888 these relocations is generated.
5890 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5891 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5893 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5894 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5895 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5897 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5899 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5900 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5901 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5902 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5903 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5904 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5905 implementation does not.
5907 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5909 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5910 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5911 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5912 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5915 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5916 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5918 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5919 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5920 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5921 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5922 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5923 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5924 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5926 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5928 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5929 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5930 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5931 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5932 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5934 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5935 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5939 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5941 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5942 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5943 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5944 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5947 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5948 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5950 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5951 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5952 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5953 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5954 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5957 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5960 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5961 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5962 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5963 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5965 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5966 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5967 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5968 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5970 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5971 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5972 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5973 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5974 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5976 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5977 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5980 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5982 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5983 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5984 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5985 which is the name of the module:
5987 \c library mylib.rdl
5990 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5992 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5993 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5994 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5999 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
6000 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
6001 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
6003 \c module $kernel.core
6006 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
6009 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
6010 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
6011 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
6012 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
6013 is a procedure (function) or data object.
6015 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
6018 \c global sys_open:export
6020 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
6021 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
6023 \c global sys_open:export proc
6025 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
6026 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
6028 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
6031 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} Directive\I{EXTERN,
6034 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
6035 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
6036 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
6037 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
6038 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
6039 (function) or data object. For example:
6042 \c extern _open:import
6043 \c extern _printf:import proc
6044 \c extern _errno:import data
6046 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
6047 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
6050 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
6052 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
6053 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
6054 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
6055 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
6057 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
6058 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
6059 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
6060 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
6061 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
6062 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
6063 and in what order they happen.
6065 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
6067 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
6069 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
6070 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
6071 different object format, because each object format defines its own
6072 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
6073 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
6074 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
6075 native object format selected:
6077 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
6078 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
6080 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
6081 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
6082 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
6083 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
6084 the final diagnostic output.
6086 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
6087 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
6088 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
6089 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
6090 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
6091 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
6092 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
6094 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
6095 them all to its output file.
6098 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
6100 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
6101 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
6102 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
6103 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
6104 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
6107 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
6109 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
6110 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
6111 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
6112 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
6113 support the \c{.COM} format.
6115 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
6116 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
6117 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
6118 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
6119 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
6120 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
6121 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
6123 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
6127 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6129 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
6130 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
6132 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
6133 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
6134 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
6135 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
6136 An LZH archiver can be found at
6137 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
6138 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
6139 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
6140 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
6141 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
6142 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
6143 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
6144 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
6146 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
6147 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
6148 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
6149 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
6150 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
6151 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
6152 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
6154 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
6155 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
6156 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
6157 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
6158 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
6159 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
6170 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
6171 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
6172 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
6173 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
6174 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
6175 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
6178 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
6179 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
6180 into the resulting executable file.
6186 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
6187 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
6188 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
6189 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
6194 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
6198 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
6200 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
6202 \c segment stack stack
6206 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
6207 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
6208 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
6209 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
6210 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
6211 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
6214 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
6215 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
6216 world' and then exit.
6219 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6221 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
6222 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
6223 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
6224 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
6225 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
6228 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6229 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
6230 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
6232 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
6233 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
6234 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
6235 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
6236 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
6237 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
6238 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
6239 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
6240 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
6242 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
6243 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
6244 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
6245 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
6246 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
6247 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
6248 explicitly issue one of your own.
6250 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
6251 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
6252 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
6253 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
6255 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
6256 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
6257 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
6258 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
6261 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
6262 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
6266 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
6268 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
6269 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
6270 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
6274 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6276 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
6277 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
6278 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
6279 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
6287 \c ; put your code here
6291 \c ; put data items here
6295 \c ; put uninitialized data here
6297 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
6298 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
6299 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
6302 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
6303 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
6304 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
6305 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
6306 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
6309 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
6311 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
6313 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
6314 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
6315 and give the desired file name.
6318 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6320 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
6321 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
6322 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
6323 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
6324 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
6325 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
6328 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6330 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6331 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6332 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6333 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6334 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6335 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6336 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6337 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6338 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6340 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6342 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6343 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6344 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6345 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6348 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6350 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6351 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6352 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6353 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6354 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6355 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6358 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6359 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6360 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6361 though it is not actually code.
6363 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6364 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6365 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6366 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6369 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6371 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6372 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6373 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6374 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6377 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6379 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6380 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6381 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6382 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6383 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6384 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6385 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6386 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6388 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6389 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6405 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6406 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6408 If you then declare an external like this:
6412 then the macro will expand it as
6415 \c %define printf _printf
6417 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6418 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6420 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6421 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6422 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6424 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6426 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6428 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6429 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6430 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6433 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6434 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6435 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6436 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6437 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6438 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6439 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6440 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6441 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6442 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6444 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6445 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6446 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6447 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6448 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6449 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6450 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6452 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6453 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6454 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6455 segment part of the full data item address).
6457 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6458 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6459 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6460 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6461 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6462 pointers you are passed.
6464 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6465 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6466 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6467 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6468 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6470 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6471 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6472 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6473 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6474 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6475 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6476 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6477 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6478 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6479 variables in this latter case.
6481 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6482 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6483 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6484 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6488 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6490 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6491 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6492 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6493 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6495 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6496 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6497 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6499 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6500 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6503 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6504 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6505 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6506 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6507 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6508 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6509 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6510 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6512 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6513 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6514 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6515 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6516 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6517 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6518 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6519 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6520 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6521 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6522 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6523 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6524 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6527 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6528 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6529 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6531 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6532 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6533 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6534 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6536 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6537 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6538 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6541 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6542 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6543 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6544 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6545 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6546 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6547 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6550 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6551 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6552 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6553 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6554 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6555 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6556 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6557 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6558 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6559 sequence points without performance suffering.
6561 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6562 The following example is for small model:
6569 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6570 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6574 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6578 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6579 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6580 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6581 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6582 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6583 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6585 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6586 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6590 \c ; and then, further down...
6592 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6593 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6595 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6597 \c ; then those data items...
6602 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6604 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6607 \c int myint = 1234;
6608 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6610 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6611 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6612 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6615 \c push word [myint]
6616 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6617 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6621 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6622 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6623 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6624 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6625 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6626 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6627 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6628 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6629 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6630 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6634 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6636 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6637 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6638 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6639 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6640 accessed from assembler as
6646 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6647 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6648 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6654 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6655 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6656 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6657 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6658 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6659 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6660 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6661 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6663 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6664 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6665 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6666 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6667 one offset and using just that.
6669 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6670 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6671 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6672 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6673 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6680 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6681 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6682 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6683 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6684 out how your own compiler does it.
6687 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6689 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6690 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6691 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6692 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6693 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6695 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6696 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6698 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6705 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6706 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6711 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6712 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6713 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6715 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6716 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6717 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6718 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6719 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6720 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6721 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6723 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6724 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6725 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6726 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6727 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6728 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6729 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6731 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6732 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6733 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6735 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6743 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6744 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6745 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6750 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6751 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6752 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6755 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6757 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6758 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6760 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6761 not required for Pascal.
6763 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6764 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6765 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6766 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6767 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6768 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6769 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6770 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6771 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6772 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6773 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6774 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6776 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6778 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6780 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6781 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6782 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6785 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6787 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6788 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6789 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6790 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6793 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6794 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6795 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6797 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6798 control to the callee.
6800 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6801 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6802 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6803 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6804 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6805 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6806 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6807 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6809 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6810 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6811 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6812 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6813 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6814 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6815 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6817 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6818 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6819 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6821 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6822 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6823 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6824 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6825 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6826 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6827 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6828 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6829 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6830 \c{RETF} instruction.
6832 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6833 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6834 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6835 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6836 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6837 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6840 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6841 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6844 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6845 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6851 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6852 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6853 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6857 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6859 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6861 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6862 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6866 \c ; and then, further down...
6868 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6869 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6870 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6871 \c call far SomeFunc
6873 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6875 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6876 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6879 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6882 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6883 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6884 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6885 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6886 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6889 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6890 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6892 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6893 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6895 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6896 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6898 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6899 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6902 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6904 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6905 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6906 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6907 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6908 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6909 generated with an operand.
6911 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6912 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6913 reverse order. For example:
6921 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6922 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6923 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6928 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6929 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6930 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6931 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6932 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6933 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6937 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6939 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6940 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6941 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6942 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6943 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6946 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6947 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6948 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6949 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6950 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6951 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6952 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6953 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6954 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6955 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6956 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6957 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6961 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6963 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6964 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6965 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6968 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6970 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6971 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6972 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6973 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6974 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6975 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6977 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6978 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6979 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6980 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6981 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6983 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6985 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6987 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6988 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6989 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6990 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6992 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6993 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6994 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6996 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6997 control to the callee.
6999 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
7000 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
7001 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
7002 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
7003 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
7004 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
7005 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
7006 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
7008 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
7009 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
7010 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
7011 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
7012 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
7013 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
7014 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
7015 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
7016 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
7017 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
7018 and type of the remaining ones.
7020 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
7021 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
7022 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
7024 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
7025 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
7026 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
7029 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
7030 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
7031 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
7033 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
7034 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
7035 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
7036 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
7037 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
7038 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
7039 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
7042 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
7043 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
7044 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
7045 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
7046 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
7047 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
7048 still pushed in right-to-left order.
7050 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
7057 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
7058 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
7062 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
7065 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
7066 assembly code, you would do something like this:
7070 \c ; and then, further down...
7072 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
7073 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
7075 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
7077 \c ; then those data items...
7082 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
7084 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
7086 \c int myint = 1234;
7087 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
7090 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
7092 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
7093 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
7094 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
7095 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
7096 accessed from assembler as
7101 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
7102 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
7103 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
7108 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
7109 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
7110 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
7111 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
7112 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
7113 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
7114 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
7115 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
7116 are also 4 bytes long.
7118 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
7119 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
7120 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
7121 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
7122 one offset and using just that.
7124 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
7125 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
7126 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
7127 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
7128 Typically, you might find that a structure like
7135 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
7136 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
7137 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
7138 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
7139 out how your own compiler does it.
7142 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
7144 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
7145 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
7146 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
7147 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
7148 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
7150 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
7157 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
7158 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
7163 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
7164 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
7165 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
7167 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
7168 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
7169 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
7170 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
7171 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
7172 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
7173 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
7175 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
7176 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
7177 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
7180 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
7183 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
7184 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
7185 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
7186 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
7187 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
7189 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
7190 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
7191 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
7192 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
7194 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
7195 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
7196 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
7197 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
7199 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
7202 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
7204 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
7205 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
7206 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
7207 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
7208 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
7209 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
7210 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
7212 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
7213 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
7214 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
7215 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
7216 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
7217 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
7220 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
7222 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
7225 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
7226 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
7228 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
7229 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
7230 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
7239 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
7241 \c ; the function body comes here
7248 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
7249 second leading underscore.)
7251 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
7252 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
7253 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
7254 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
7255 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
7257 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
7258 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
7259 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
7260 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
7261 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
7262 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
7263 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
7264 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
7265 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
7266 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
7267 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
7268 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
7269 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
7270 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
7271 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
7272 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
7274 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
7275 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
7276 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
7283 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
7287 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
7289 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
7290 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
7291 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
7292 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
7293 way this works is like this:
7295 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
7297 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
7298 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
7299 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
7300 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
7302 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
7303 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
7304 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
7305 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
7306 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
7307 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
7309 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
7310 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
7311 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
7314 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
7316 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
7317 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
7318 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
7319 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
7320 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
7321 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
7322 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
7323 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
7324 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
7327 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7329 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7330 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7331 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7332 has every necessary entry present.
7334 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7337 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7339 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7340 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7341 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7342 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7343 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7344 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7347 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7349 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7355 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7357 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7362 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7363 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7364 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7365 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7366 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7367 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7368 effectively, it has become).
7370 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7371 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7374 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7376 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7377 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7378 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7379 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7380 which resides elsewhere.
7382 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7384 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7386 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7387 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7388 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7390 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7391 functions by means of
7393 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7395 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7397 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt ..sym
7399 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7400 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7401 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7404 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7406 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7407 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7408 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7409 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7410 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7411 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7412 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7415 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7416 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7417 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7418 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7422 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7424 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7425 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7427 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7428 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7430 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7431 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7432 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7433 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7435 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7437 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7438 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7441 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7443 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7444 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7445 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7446 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7447 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7448 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7451 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7453 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7454 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7455 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7456 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7457 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7458 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7459 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7460 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7462 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7463 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7464 segment, so just coding, for example,
7466 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7468 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7469 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7472 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7473 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7474 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7475 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7477 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7479 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7480 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7481 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7482 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7483 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7484 segment to a 32-bit one.
7486 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7487 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7489 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7491 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7492 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7493 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7496 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7497 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7499 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7500 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7501 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7502 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7503 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7505 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7506 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7507 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7508 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7510 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7511 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7512 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7514 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7515 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7517 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7518 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7519 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7520 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7521 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7523 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7524 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7526 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7528 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7529 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7530 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7532 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7534 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7535 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7536 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7537 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7539 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7541 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7544 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7545 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7547 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7549 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7550 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7551 offset), and calls that address.
7554 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7556 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7557 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7558 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7559 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7560 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7562 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7563 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7564 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7565 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7569 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7570 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7571 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7572 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7574 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7575 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7576 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7577 instructions with implicit addressing:
7578 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7579 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7580 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7581 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7582 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7583 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7585 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7586 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7587 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7588 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7589 size from the code segment.
7591 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7592 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7593 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7594 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7595 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7596 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7601 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7602 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7605 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7606 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7609 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7611 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7612 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7613 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7614 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7616 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7617 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7618 registers, which still add their bases.
7620 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7621 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7622 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7623 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7624 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7626 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7627 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7628 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7629 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7630 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7632 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7633 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7634 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7635 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7637 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7638 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7639 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7642 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7644 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7645 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7647 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7648 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7649 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7650 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7652 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7653 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7654 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7655 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7656 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7657 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7658 can be used for this purpose.
7660 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7662 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7663 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7664 immediates to 32 bits.
7666 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7670 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7671 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7672 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7673 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7674 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7676 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7677 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7678 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7679 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7681 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7683 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7684 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7685 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7686 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7687 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7688 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7692 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7693 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7694 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7698 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7699 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7700 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7701 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7703 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7704 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7706 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7708 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7710 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}
7712 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7713 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7715 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7716 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7717 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7718 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7719 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7721 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7723 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7724 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7725 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7726 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7728 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7730 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7732 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7734 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7736 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7738 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7740 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7742 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}
7744 What follows is a simplified summary.
7746 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7747 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7748 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7749 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7750 use by the function without saving.
7752 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7754 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7755 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7756 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7758 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7760 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7762 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7764 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7766 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7768 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7769 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7770 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7771 that isn't listed here.
7774 \H{problems} Common Problems
7776 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7778 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7779 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7780 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7781 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7782 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7783 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7784 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7785 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7786 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7789 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7791 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7792 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7793 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7796 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7797 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7798 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7799 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7800 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7801 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7802 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7803 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7804 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7805 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7806 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7807 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7810 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7812 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7813 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7814 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7815 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7819 \c ; some boot sector code
7824 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7825 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7826 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7830 \c ; some boot sector code
7832 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7835 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7836 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7837 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7838 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7839 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7840 find out what's wrong with it.
7843 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7845 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7850 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7851 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7854 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7855 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7856 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7857 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7858 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7859 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7860 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7861 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7862 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7863 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7865 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7868 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7870 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7871 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7872 problem and generate sensible code.
7875 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7877 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7878 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7879 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7881 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
7882 (click on "Bug Tracker"), or if that fails then through one of the
7883 contacts in \k{contact}.
7885 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7886 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7887 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7888 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7889 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7890 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7893 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7896 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7897 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7899 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7900 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7901 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7902 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7903 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7904 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7907 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7908 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7909 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7911 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7912 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7913 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7914 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7915 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7916 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7917 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7918 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7920 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7921 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7922 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7923 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7924 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7925 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7926 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7927 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7928 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7929 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7930 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7931 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7932 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7934 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7935 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7936 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7937 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7938 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7939 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7940 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7941 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7942 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7943 should be 77 instead'.
7945 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7946 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7947 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7948 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7949 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7950 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7951 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7954 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7955 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7956 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7957 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7958 differently from us.
7961 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7963 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7965 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7968 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7969 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7970 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7971 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7972 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7974 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7975 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7976 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7977 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7981 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7983 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7984 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7985 are on a Unix system.
7988 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7990 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7992 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7994 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7995 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7996 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7997 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7999 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
8000 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
8001 summary of command line options.
8004 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
8006 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
8007 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
8008 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
8009 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
8012 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
8013 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
8014 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
8015 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
8016 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
8018 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
8020 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
8025 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
8027 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
8028 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
8029 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
8030 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
8031 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
8032 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
8033 Then it will reach the code section.
8035 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
8036 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
8037 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
8038 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
8039 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
8040 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
8041 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
8044 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
8045 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
8046 only handle 2147483647 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
8047 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
8048 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
8049 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
8050 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
8051 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
8052 the instructions in your code section.
8054 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
8055 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
8056 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
8059 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
8063 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
8065 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
8066 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
8069 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
8072 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
8073 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
8074 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
8075 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
8076 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
8077 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
8080 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
8081 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
8082 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
8083 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
8085 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
8086 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
8087 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
8088 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
8089 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
8090 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
8091 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
8093 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
8094 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
8095 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
8096 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
8097 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
8099 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
8100 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
8101 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
8102 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
8103 you may still have to place some manually.
8105 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
8106 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
8107 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
8110 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
8111 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
8112 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
8113 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
8114 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
8115 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
8116 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
8117 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
8118 suppress disassembly of the data area.
8121 \S{ndisother} Other Options
8123 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
8124 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
8125 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
8126 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
8128 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
8129 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
8130 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
8131 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
8132 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
8136 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
8138 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
8139 possible, should be sent to
8140 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
8142 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
8143 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
8144 new features as well.
8146 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
8148 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
8150 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
8151 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
8152 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
8153 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
8157 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}